1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
Order Today|Dealer-Direct Buy Prices|Delivered + Installed in 48 States

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings Delivered & Installed Starting From $26,485

Steel And Stud is your trusted commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. Order pre-engineered metal buildings for business use in any width and length with pricing starting from $26,485 installed. Request metal building pricing, customize your steel building design, and schedule professional steel building installation across 48 states. Get a free quote, compare commercial building packages, or call 1-877-275-7048 to plan your project today.

$26,485
Starting From
100ft
Clear Span Width
20yr
12ga Frame Warranty
48
States Delivered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1801–1840 of 2740 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Matte black metal barn with roll-up door open showing tractor and farm implements inside

16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed | Steel and Stud, From $13,900

12

16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,850$13,900SAVE $1,950
or $290/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Equipment and Implement Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

16×56 delivers 896 sq ft of rugged equipment and implement shed space. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a brush hog, a UTV, and round-bale equipment under one roof. Twelve-foot legs clear ROPS frames and the 48-ft.

You’re viewing:Equipment and Implement Shed·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,900$15,850Save $1,950
or as low as $290/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$12,000
16×56
this size
$13,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Open Carport Style
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-EQUIPMENT-IMPLEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. 16×56 delivers 896 sq ft of rugged equipment and implement shed space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Tractor bayImplement bayTool rack16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

Tractor bay · Implement bay · Tool rack

Tractor bay at the front, implement bay in the middle, tool rack at the rear. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a brush hog, a UTV, and round-bale equipment under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment and Implement Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment and Implement Shed spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment and Implement Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment and implement shed
Everyday equipment and implement shed
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment and implement shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment and implement shed + seasonal storage
equipment and implement shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$290/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 equipment and implement shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $290/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment and Implement Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment and Implement Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment and Implement Shed also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment and Implement Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 equipment and implement shed cost?

A 16×56 equipment and implement shed from Steel and Stud starts at $13,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $290/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 equipment and implement shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment and implement shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 equipment and implement shed?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment and implement shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 equipment and implement shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 equipment and implement shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 equipment and implement shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $290/month on a 16×56 equipment and implement shed.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 equipment and implement shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 equipment and implement shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×56 equipment and implement shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment and Implement Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Matte black metal barn with roll-up door open showing tractor and farm implements inside

16×56 Equipment and Implement Shed

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black wainscoting, roll-up door, and gooseneck barn light

16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo | Steel and Stud, From $13,250

12

16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,100$13,250SAVE $1,850
or $276/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo, built for daily backyard use.

16×56 delivers 896 sq ft of everyday garage plus man cave combo space. Split the 896 sq ft with a steel-stud interior partition: 16×56 for the daily driver, 16×56 finished out as a man cave with insulated walls, a.

You’re viewing:Garage Plus Man Cave Combo·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,250$15,100Save $1,850
or as low as $276/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$11,350
16×56
this size
$13,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partition
  • French Door Add-On
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-GARAGE-PLUS-MAN-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. 16×56 delivers 896 sq ft of everyday garage plus man cave combo space.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles + small workshop. Split the 896 sq ft with a steel-stud interior partition: 16×56 for the daily driver, 16×56 finished out as a man cave with insulated walls, a mini-split, and a French door.

💡 Pro tip:Mix Color Walls. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage Plus Man Cave Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage Plus Man Cave Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garage plus man cave combo
Everyday garage plus man cave combo
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage plus man cave combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage plus man cave combo + seasonal storage
garage plus man cave combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$276/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 garage plus man cave combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $276/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage Plus Man Cave Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage Plus Man Cave Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage Plus Man Cave Combo also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo cost?

A 16×56 garage plus man cave combo from Steel and Stud starts at $13,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $276/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 garage plus man cave combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage plus man cave combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage plus man cave combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $276/month on a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 garage plus man cave combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 garage plus man cave combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×56 garage plus man cave combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×56 garage plus man cave combo typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage Plus Man Cave Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black wainscoting, roll-up door, and gooseneck barn light

16×56 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal barn with cream trim, three stall doors, cupola, and split rail fence

16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $13,900

12

16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,850$13,900SAVE $1,950
or $290/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Three-Stall Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×56 three-stall horse barn packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners with a small herd fit three 16×56 stalls along the 48-ft length plus an 8-ft tack.

You’re viewing:Three-Stall Horse Barn·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,900$15,850Save $1,950
or as low as $290/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$12,000
16×56
this size
$13,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Gable Vents
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-THREE-STALL-HORSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×56 three-stall horse barn packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

3 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

3 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

3 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 3 horses + tack + feed. Rural property owners with a small herd fit three 16×56 stalls along the 48-ft length plus an 8-ft tack and feed bay at the end.

💡 Pro tip:Lean-To Ready. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Stall Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Stall Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday three-stall horse barn
Everyday three-stall horse barn
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
three-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$290/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 three-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $290/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Stall Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Stall Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Stall Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 three-stall horse barn cost?

A 16×56 three-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $13,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $290/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 three-stall horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud three-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 three-stall horse barn?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 three-stall horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 three-stall horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 three-stall horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $290/month on a 16×56 three-stall horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 three-stall horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 three-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×56 three-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal barn with cream trim, three stall doors, cupola, and split rail fence

16×56 Three-Stall Horse Barn

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

16×56 Detached Contractor Shop

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Detached Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $15,100

12

16×56 Detached Contractor Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,200$15,100SAVE $2,100
or $315/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Detached Contractor Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Detached Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 16×56 detached contractor shop? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the business from a 16×56 with one 16×56.

You’re viewing:Detached Contractor Shop·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,100$17,200Save $2,100
or as low as $315/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$13,200
16×56
this size
$15,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame Upgrade
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • Office Partition
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-DETACHED-CONTRACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Looking for a 16×56 detached contractor shop? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Inventory racksLOADING BAYOffice / Desk16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the business from a 16×56 with one 16×56 roll-up for the work van, a walk-in to the front-office bay, and racked storage along the 48-ft sidewall for stock and tools.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Cert.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Detached Contractor Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Contractor Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Contractor Shop spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Contractor Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday detached contractor shop
Everyday detached contractor shop
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached contractor shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached contractor shop + seasonal storage
detached contractor shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Detached Contractor Shop, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$315/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 detached contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $315/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Contractor Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Detached Contractor Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Detached Contractor Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Contractor Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Contractor Shop also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Contractor Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 detached contractor shop cost?

A 16×56 detached contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $15,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $315/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 detached contractor shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 detached contractor shop?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 detached contractor shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 detached contractor shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 detached contractor shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $315/month on a 16×56 detached contractor shop.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 detached contractor shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 detached contractor shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 16×56 detached contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

16×56 Detached Contractor Shop

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal building boat garage with open roll-up door on a lakefront lot

16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $13,250

12

16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,100$13,250SAVE $1,850
or $276/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Boat and Trailer Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 16×56 boat and trailer storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Lake-area homeowners park a 24-ft wakeboat on its trailer plus a tandem-axle utility.

You’re viewing:Boat and Trailer Storage·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,250$15,100Save $1,850
or as low as $276/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$11,350
16×56
this size
$13,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Anchor Upgrade
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 16×56 boat and trailer storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Boat + trailerDaily driverOutboard / rinse16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Lake-area homeowners park a 24-ft wakeboat on its trailer plus a tandem-axle utility trailer and a pair of jet skis.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal-Rated.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and trailer storage
Everyday boat and trailer storage
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat and trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$276/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 boat and trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $276/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 boat and trailer storage cost?

A 16×56 boat and trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $276/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 boat and trailer storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 boat and trailer storage?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 boat and trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 boat and trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 boat and trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $276/month on a 16×56 boat and trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 boat and trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 boat and trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×56 boat and trailer storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal building boat garage with open roll-up door on a lakefront lot

16×56 Boat and Trailer Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

16×56 She Shed and Studio Space

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 She Shed and Studio Space | Steel and Stud, From $13,250

12

16×56 She Shed and Studio Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,100$13,250SAVE $1,850
or $276/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56She Shed and Studio Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 She Shed and Studio Space, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 16×56 she shed and studio space? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Homeowners building a quilting studio, pottery shop, or home yoga space pick the.

You’re viewing:She Shed and Studio Space·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,250$15,100Save $1,850
or as low as $276/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$11,350
16×56
this size
$13,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • 6 Windows
  • 2 Skylights
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-SHE-SHED-STUDIO-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Looking for a 16×56 she shed and studio space? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Homeowners building a quilting studio, pottery shop, or home yoga space pick the 16×56 for daylight along both 48-ft sidewalls.

💡 Pro tip:Custom Color.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 She Shed and Studio Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She Shed and Studio Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She Shed and Studio Space spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She Shed and Studio Space.

DAILY USEEveryday she shed and studio space
Everyday she shed and studio space
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed and studio space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe shed and studio space + seasonal storage
she shed and studio space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 She Shed and Studio Space, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$276/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 she shed and studio space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $276/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She Shed and Studio Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 She Shed and Studio Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 She Shed and Studio Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She Shed and Studio Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She Shed and Studio Space also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She Shed and Studio Space questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 she shed and studio space cost?

A 16×56 she shed and studio space from Steel and Stud starts at $13,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $276/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 she shed and studio space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed and studio space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 she shed and studio space?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she shed and studio space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 she shed and studio space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 she shed and studio space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 she shed and studio space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $276/month on a 16×56 she shed and studio space.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 she shed and studio space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 she shed and studio space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×56 she shed and studio space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×56 she shed and studio space typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your She Shed and Studio Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

16×56 She Shed and Studio Space

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with wide open bay door revealing a welding and plasma shop

16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop | Steel and Stud, From $15,500

12

16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,650$15,500SAVE $2,150
or $323/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Fabrication and Welding Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 16×56 fabrication and welding shop packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Welders and metal fabricators run a 16×56 with a 16×56 roll-up for.

You’re viewing:Fabrication and Welding Shop·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,500$17,650Save $2,150
or as low as $323/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$13,600
16×56
this size
$15,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Slab-Spec Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-FABRICATION-WELDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 16×56 fabrication and welding shop packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Welders and metal fabricators run a 16×56 with a 16×56 roll-up for material delivery, a concrete slab rated for skid-loader traffic, and 12-gauge framing for hanging chain hoists.

💡 Pro tip:Heavy-Use Build. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication and Welding Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication and Welding Shop spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication and Welding Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication and welding shop
Everyday fabrication and welding shop
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication and welding shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
fabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$323/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 fabrication and welding shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $323/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication and Welding Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication and Welding Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication and Welding Shop also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication and Welding Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 fabrication and welding shop cost?

A 16×56 fabrication and welding shop from Steel and Stud starts at $15,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $323/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 fabrication and welding shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication and welding shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 fabrication and welding shop?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication and welding shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 fabrication and welding shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 fabrication and welding shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 fabrication and welding shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $323/month on a 16×56 fabrication and welding shop.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 fabrication and welding shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 fabrication and welding shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×56 fabrication and welding shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 16×56 fabrication and welding shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication and Welding Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with wide open bay door revealing a welding and plasma shop

16×56 Fabrication and Welding Shop

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and attached lean to equipment shelter

16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $15,100

12

16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,200$15,100SAVE $2,100
or $315/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Mobile Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 16×56 mobile equipment storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Landscape and excavation crews park two F-250s, a skid steer on a trailer.

You’re viewing:Mobile Equipment Storage·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,100$17,200Save $2,100
or as low as $315/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$13,200
16×56
this size
$15,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Drive-Through Layout
  • Two Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-MOBILE-EQUIPMENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your mobile equipment storage layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 16×56 mobile equipment storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · mobile equipment storage layout

Mobile Equipment Storage layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 16×56 mobile equipment storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Landscape and excavation crews park two F-250s, a skid steer on a trailer, and a 14-ft enclosed tool trailer inside one 16×56. The 12-ft legs clear stake-bed racks, and a 16×56 roll-up on each gable lets the crew pull straight through every morning.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile equipment storage
Everyday mobile equipment storage
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile equipment storage + seasonal storage
mobile equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$315/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 mobile equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $315/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mobile Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏡 16×56

Woodshop and Home Gym Split

16×56 woodshop and home gym split configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Woodshop and Home Gym Split →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 mobile equipment storage cost?

A 16×56 mobile equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $15,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $315/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 mobile equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mobile equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 mobile equipment storage?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 mobile equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 mobile equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 mobile equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $315/month on a 16×56 mobile equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 mobile equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 mobile equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 16×56 mobile equipment storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and attached lean to equipment shelter

16×56 Mobile Equipment Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with open roll-up door, welder at work, forklift, and steel stock

16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split | Steel and Stud, From $13,250

12

16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,100$13,250SAVE $1,850
or $276/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×56Woodshop and Home Gym Split

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split, built for daily backyard use.

Our 16×56 woodshop and home gym split fits 16-foot widths and 56-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. 16×56 delivers 896 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space.

You’re viewing:Woodshop and Home Gym Split·Size16×56·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,250$15,100Save $1,850
or as low as $276/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×56
16×48
smaller
$11,350
16×56
this size
$13,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Wall
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Insulated Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X56-WOODSHOP-HOME-GYBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

16 feet wide × 56 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Our 16×56 woodshop and home gym split fits 16-foot widths and 56-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack16′ × 56′ · 896 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. 16×56 delivers 896 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space.

💡 Pro tip:Two Rooms. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Woodshop and Home Gym Split.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×56 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Woodshop and Home Gym Split spec sheet.

Width16′
Length56′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Woodshop and Home Gym Split.

DAILY USEEveryday woodshop and home gym split
Everyday woodshop and home gym split
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a woodshop and home gym split.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwoodshop and home gym split + seasonal storage
woodshop and home gym split + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$276/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×56 woodshop and home gym split is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $276/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×56?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 56′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Woodshop and Home Gym Split shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×56 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×56 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Woodshop and Home Gym Split · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×57×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Woodshop and Home Gym Split also viewed:

🏡 16×56

Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage

16×56 two-car detached garage with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage →

🎯 16×56

Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through

16×56 class a rv cover and drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through →

🏡 16×56

Home Hobby Shop and Side Business

16×56 home hobby shop and side business configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Hobby Shop and Side Business →

🌾 16×56

Equipment and Implement Shed

16×56 equipment and implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment and Implement Shed →

🏡 16×56

Garage Plus Man Cave Combo

16×56 garage plus man cave combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage Plus Man Cave Combo →

🌾 16×56

Three-Stall Horse Barn

16×56 three-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Stall Horse Barn →

🏢 16×56

Detached Contractor Shop

16×56 detached contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Contractor Shop →

🎯 16×56

Boat and Trailer Storage

16×56 boat and trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Trailer Storage →

🏡 16×56

She Shed and Studio Space

16×56 she shed and studio space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Studio Space →

🏭 16×56

Fabrication and Welding Shop

16×56 fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🏢 16×56

Mobile Equipment Storage

16×56 mobile equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Equipment Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Woodshop and Home Gym Split questions, answered.

How much does a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split cost?

A 16×56 woodshop and home gym split from Steel and Stud starts at $13,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $276/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×56 woodshop and home gym split price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $276/month on a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split.

What warranty comes with the 16×56 woodshop and home gym split?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×56 woodshop and home gym split in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×56 woodshop and home gym split add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×56 woodshop and home gym split typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Woodshop and Home Gym Split quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with open roll-up door, welder at work, forklift, and steel stock

16×56 Woodshop and Home Gym Split

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 56′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×56 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Deep blue metal garage with tall black roll-up door and wainscot near a lake at dusk

20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Single-Car Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 20×25 metal garage fits a full-size pickup or SUV with 4-5 feet of.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Metal Garage·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-SINGLE-CAR-METALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. 20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car metal garage
Everyday single-car metal garage
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car metal garage + seasonal storage
single-car metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 single-car metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 single-car metal garage cost?

A 20×25 single-car metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 single-car metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 single-car metal garage?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 single-car metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 single-car metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 single-car metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 single-car metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 single-car metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 single-car metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 single-car metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 single-car metal garage typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Deep blue metal garage with tall black roll-up door and wainscot near a lake at dusk

20×25 Single-Car Metal Garage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tall dark green metal workshop with white roll-up door open and work van parked

20×25 Metal Workshop

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Metal Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Metal Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Metal Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Metal Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×25 metal workshop? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. 20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of everyday metal workshop space. Hobbyists building furniture.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-METAL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact workshop.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Single roll-up + walk-in. Looking for a 20×25 metal workshop? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Workbench wallTOOL STORAGEFloor space20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · compact workshop

Workbench wall · Tool storage · Floor space

Workbench wall at the front, tool storage in the middle, floor space at the rear. Capacity: personal workshop. 20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of everyday metal workshop space.

💡 Pro tip:Permit-Ready Drawings. Size affords: workbench, pegboard wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Metal Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop
Everyday metal workshop
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop + seasonal storage
metal workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Metal Workshop, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 metal workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Metal Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Metal Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 metal workshop cost?

A 20×25 metal workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 metal workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 metal workshop?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 metal workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 metal workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 metal workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 metal workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 metal workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 metal workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 metal workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 metal workshop typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tall dark green metal workshop with white roll-up door open and work van parked

20×25 Metal Workshop

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal shed with lean-to roof and open front below snowy peaks

20×25 Storage Shed

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×25 storage shed fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. A 20×25 storage shed swallows a riding mower, push mower, snow blower, kayaks, bikes.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage shed layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 20×25 storage shed fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · storage shed layout

Storage Shed layout.

Our 20×25 storage shed fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. A 20×25 storage shed swallows a riding mower, push mower, snow blower, kayaks, bikes, and an entire wall of shelving with room left over. Small property owners and gardeners pick the 20×25 shed kit when a 20×25 ran out of space and they want one structure that handles every season.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 storage shed cost?

A 20×25 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 storage shed?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 storage shed typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal shed with lean-to roof and open front below snowy peaks

20×25 Storage Shed

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

20×25 Backyard Home Office

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×25 backyard home office packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 20×25 backyard home office fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Panels
  • French Doors
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-office layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×25 backyard home office packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Work zoneMeeting / deskSTORAGE / MECH20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · home-office layout

Work zone · Meeting / desk · Storage / Mech

Work zone at the front, meeting / desk in the middle, storage / mech at the rear. Our 20×25 backyard home office fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Insulation.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 backyard home office cost?

A 20×25 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 backyard home office?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 backyard home office typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

20×25 Backyard Home Office

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Hobby Room / She-Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×25 hobby room / she-shed fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Looking for a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room / She-Shed·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Skylights
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-HOBBY-ROOM-SHE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 20×25 hobby room / she-shed fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Looking for a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

💡 Pro tip:17 Color Options.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room / She-Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room / She-Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room / She-Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room / she-shed
Everyday hobby room / she-shed
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room / she-shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
hobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 hobby room / she-shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room / She-Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room / She-Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room / She-Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room / She-Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed cost?

A 20×25 hobby room / she-shed from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 hobby room / she-shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 hobby room / she-shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 hobby room / she-shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 hobby room / she-shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 hobby room / she-shed typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room / She-Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

20×25 Hobby Room / She-Shed

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

20×25 Pool House

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×25 pool house packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 20×25 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Half Enclosure
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×25 pool house packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Our 20×25 pool house fits 20-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

💡 Pro tip:Lean-To Available.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Pool House, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 pool house cost?

A 20×25 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 pool house?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 pool house typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

20×25 Pool House

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Wood tone metal carport with open drive-through bay beside a fenced pasture, steel carport framing

20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $8,050

12

20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,200$8,050SAVE $1,150
or $168/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Garden Shed with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 20×25 garden shed with lean-to fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Looking for a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to? At 500 sq ft, this footprint.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Lean-To·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,050$9,200Save $1,150
or as low as $168/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$8,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Roof
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Lean-To
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-GARDEN-SHED-LEANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garden shed with lean-to layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 20×25 garden shed with lean-to fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · garden shed with lean-to layout

Garden Shed with Lean-To layout.

Our 20×25 garden shed with lean-to fits 20-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Looking for a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Gardeners running raised beds and a small orchard need more than a 20×25 plastic shed. 500 sq ft holds a potting bench, two wall-length tool racks, bagged soil pallets, and a wheelbarrow with room to maneuver. Add a 6-foot lean-to for tractor or UTV cover.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with lean-to
Everyday garden shed with lean-to
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
garden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$168/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 garden shed with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $168/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to cost?

A 20×25 garden shed with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $8,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $168/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 garden shed with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $168/month on a 20×25 garden shed with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 garden shed with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 garden shed with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×25 garden shed with lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Wood tone metal carport with open drive-through bay beside a fenced pasture, steel carport framing

20×25 Garden Shed with Lean-To

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior fitted as a contractor shop with lumber racks, workbench, and power tools

20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,050

12

20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,200$8,050SAVE $1,150
or $168/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers and acreage owners park a compact tractor, two ATVs, and a UTV with attachments.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed and Equipment Storage·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,050$9,200Save $1,150
or as low as $168/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$8,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-TOOL-SHED-EQUIPMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your tool shed and equipment storage layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · tool shed and equipment storage layout

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers and acreage owners park a compact tractor, two ATVs, and a UTV with attachments hung on the wall. 12-foot legs clear roll cages and ROPS bars. The 16-by-24 metal building footprint is the smallest that handles full-size lawn and garden equipment with a workbench.

💡 Pro tip:Wind Cert Available.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed and Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed and equipment storage
Everyday tool shed and equipment storage
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed and equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed and equipment storage + seasonal storage
tool shed and equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$168/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $168/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed and Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed and Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage cost?

A 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $168/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed and equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed and equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $168/month on a 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×25 tool shed and equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior fitted as a contractor shop with lumber racks, workbench, and power tools

20×25 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with brown garage door and side entry in a cactus filled desert yard

20×25 ATV and Toy Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 ATV and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 ATV and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25ATV and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 ATV and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 500 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall.

You’re viewing:ATV and Toy Storage·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • Anchored Concrete
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-ATV-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your toy-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. 20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑ATV / bikesDaily driverTool wall20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · toy-storage layout

ATV / bikes · Daily driver · Tool wall

ATV / bikes at the front, daily driver in the middle, tool wall at the rear. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 500 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Cert.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 ATV and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv and toy storage
Everyday atv and toy storage
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv and toy storage + seasonal storage
atv and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 ATV and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 atv and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 ATV and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 ATV and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 atv and toy storage cost?

A 20×25 atv and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 atv and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 atv and toy storage?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 atv and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 atv and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 atv and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 atv and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 atv and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 atv and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×25 atv and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with brown garage door and side entry in a cactus filled desert yard

20×25 ATV and Toy Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel carport sheltering a black pickup and UTV beside a red barn

20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders with three to four bikes plus a lift table and tool chest land at this size.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle Garage and Workshop·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulation Ready
  • Walk-In Door
  • Window Kit
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-MOTORCYCLE-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Looking for a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. Riders with three to four bikes plus a lift table and tool chest land at this size after outgrowing a 20×25.

💡 Pro tip:Insulation Ready. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle Garage and Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle garage and workshop
Everyday motorcycle garage and workshop
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle garage and workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle garage and workshop + seasonal storage
motorcycle garage and workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle Garage and Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle Garage and Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop cost?

A 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle garage and workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle garage and workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle garage and workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel carport sheltering a black pickup and UTV beside a red barn

20×25 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel carport with rust colored roof sheltering a pickup beside an autumn fence line

20×25 Carport with Storage Bay

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Carport with Storage Bay | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

20×25 Carport with Storage Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Carport with Storage Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Carport with Storage Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×25 carport with storage bay? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. One car parks under cover; the back room locks down tools, tires, and yard equipment.

You’re viewing:Carport with Storage Bay·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$7,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Open Front
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-CARPORT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 20×25 carport with storage bay? At 500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Cover bayPillar zoneApproach apron20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · open-cover layout

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. One car parks under cover; the back room locks down tools, tires, and yard equipment.

💡 Pro tip:From $5,650.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Carport with Storage Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport with Storage Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport with Storage Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport with Storage Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday carport with storage bay
Everyday carport with storage bay
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport with storage bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport with storage bay + seasonal storage
carport with storage bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Carport with Storage Bay, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 carport with storage bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport with Storage Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Carport with Storage Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Carport with Storage Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport with Storage Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport with Storage Bay also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏢 20×25

Small Business Storefront

20×25 small business storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Storefront →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport with Storage Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 carport with storage bay cost?

A 20×25 carport with storage bay from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 carport with storage bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport with storage bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 carport with storage bay?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport with storage bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 carport with storage bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 carport with storage bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 carport with storage bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 20×25 carport with storage bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 carport with storage bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 carport with storage bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×25 carport with storage bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×25 carport with storage bay typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport with Storage Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel carport with rust colored roof sheltering a pickup beside an autumn fence line

20×25 Carport with Storage Bay

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green commercial metal building with covered porch and double glass storefront doors

20×25 Small Business Storefront

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×25 Small Business Storefront | Steel and Stud, From $9,250

12

20×25 Small Business Storefront
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,550$9,250SAVE $1,300
or $193/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×25Small Business Storefront

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×25 Small Business Storefront, engineered for code-compliant business use.

20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space. Roadside operators, produce stands, tackle shops, mobile detailers, use 500 sq ft as a permanent storefront. Storefront windows on the.

You’re viewing:Small Business Storefront·Size20×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,250$10,550Save $1,300
or as low as $193/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×25
20×25
this size
$9,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • Certified Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X25-SMALL-BUSINESS-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boutique storefront.

20 feet wide × 25 feet long. Glass storefront on short wall. 20×25 delivers 500 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space.

Display windowSales floorSTOCK + CHECKOUT20′ × 25′ · 500 sq ft · boutique storefront

Display window · Sales floor · Stock + checkout

Display window at the front, sales floor in the middle, stock + checkout at the rear. Capacity: compact retail (~375 sf selling). Roadside operators, produce stands, tackle shops, mobile detailers, use 500 sq ft as a permanent storefront.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified. Size affords: signage band, fitting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×25 Small Business Storefront in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Storefront.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Storefront spec sheet.

Width20′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Storefront.

DAILY USEEveryday small business storefront
Everyday small business storefront
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business storefront.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business storefront + seasonal storage
small business storefront + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×25 Small Business Storefront, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$193/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×25 small business storefront is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $193/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×25?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 25′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Storefront shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×25 Small Business Storefront buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×25 Small Business Storefront

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Storefront · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Storefront also viewed:

🏡 20×25

Single-Car Metal Garage

20×25 single-car metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Metal Garage →

🏡 20×25

Metal Workshop

20×25 metal workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Storage Shed

20×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 20×25

Backyard Home Office

20×25 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 20×25

Hobby Room / She-Shed

20×25 hobby room / she-shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She-Shed →

🏡 20×25

Pool House

20×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 20×25

Garden Shed with Lean-To

20×25 garden shed with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Lean-To →

🌾 20×25

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

20×25 tool shed and equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed and Equipment Storage →

🎯 20×25

ATV and Toy Storage

20×25 atv and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV and Toy Storage →

🎯 20×25

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

20×25 motorcycle garage and workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle Garage and Workshop →

🏡 20×25

Carport with Storage Bay

20×25 carport with storage bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Storefront questions, answered.

How much does a 20×25 small business storefront cost?

A 20×25 small business storefront from Steel and Stud starts at $9,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $193/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×25 small business storefront price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business storefront ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×25 small business storefront?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business storefront different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×25 small business storefront need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×25 small business storefront delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×25 small business storefront without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $193/month on a 20×25 small business storefront.

What warranty comes with the 20×25 small business storefront?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×25 small business storefront in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×25 small business storefront meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Storefront quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green commercial metal building with covered porch and double glass storefront doors

20×25 Small Business Storefront

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×25 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with two white garage doors under a covered side porch

20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay? At 900 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Two bay doors aren’t possible at 18 feet wide, so most buyers run one 20×45.

You’re viewing:Detached Garage with Workshop Bay·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-DETACHED-GARAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay? At 900 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two bay doors aren’t possible at 18 feet wide, so most buyers run one 20×45 roll-up plus a walk-in.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Garage with Workshop Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Garage with Workshop Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday detached garage with workshop bay
Everyday detached garage with workshop bay
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage with workshop bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached garage with workshop bay + seasonal storage
detached garage with workshop bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Garage with Workshop Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Garage with Workshop Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Garage with Workshop Bay also viewed:

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay cost?

A 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached garage with workshop bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached garage with workshop bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×45 detached garage with workshop bay typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Garage with Workshop Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with two white garage doors under a covered side porch

20×45 Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building with cream roll-up door and lean-to RV port over camper

20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. RV owners with Class C or Super C motorhomes (typically 28-32 feet) pick the.

You’re viewing:RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′-14′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • Hurricane Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-RV-COVER-CLASS-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

RV BAYDaily driverHookup / pre-wire20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 41ft + 1 daily driver. RV owners with Class C or Super C motorhomes (typically 28-32 feet) pick the 20×45 because it leaves 13+ feet of overhang behind the rig for a slide-out tongue box, generator, or kayak rack.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane Cert. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover for class c motorhomes
Everyday rv cover for class c motorhomes
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover for class c motorhomes.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover for class c motorhomes + seasonal storage
rv cover for class c motorhomes + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes cost?

A 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover for class c motorhomes ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover for class c motorhomes different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover for class c motorhomes to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building with cream roll-up door and lean-to RV port over camper

20×45 RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber metal building with covered porch and black garage door beside a lakeside firepit

20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Two-Car Single-File Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×45 two-car single-file garage fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. At 18 feet wide, you cannot park two full-size trucks side-by-side, but.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Single-File Garage·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • Drive-Through
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Insulated Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-TWO-CAR-SINGLE-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Our 20×45 two-car single-file garage fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. At 18 feet wide, you cannot park two full-size trucks side-by-side, but you can park them tandem (single-file) with 9 feet of shared aisle.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Batt. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Single-File Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Single-File Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Single-File Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car single-file garage
Everyday two-car single-file garage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car single-file garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car single-file garage + seasonal storage
two-car single-file garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 two-car single-file garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Single-File Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Single-File Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Single-File Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Single-File Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 two-car single-file garage cost?

A 20×45 two-car single-file garage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 two-car single-file garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car single-file garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 two-car single-file garage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car single-file garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 two-car single-file garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 two-car single-file garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 two-car single-file garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 20×45 two-car single-file garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 two-car single-file garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 two-car single-file garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×45 two-car single-file garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×45 two-car single-file garage typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Single-File Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber metal building with covered porch and black garage door beside a lakeside firepit

20×45 Two-Car Single-File Garage

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy metal workshop with black roll-up door and lit windows over a misty mountain lake

20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians | Steel and Stud, From $15,150

12

20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,250$15,150SAVE $2,100
or $316/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople running a service van plus parts inventory use.

You’re viewing:Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,150$17,250Save $2,100
or as low as $316/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$15,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscot
  • Walk-In Door
  • 29 GA Panel
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-TRADE-SHOP-PLUMBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your trade shop for plumbers and electricians layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · trade shop for plumbers and electricians layout

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople running a service van plus parts inventory use the 20×45 as a route shop. The van parks inside, and the back 25 feet houses bin racks, conduit storage, and a parts counter. Wainscoting on the lower 4 feet keeps the shop looking sharp from the street if your county allows commercial use on residential land.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Drawings.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians.

DAILY USEEveryday trade shop for plumbers and electricians
Everyday trade shop for plumbers and electricians
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trade shop for plumbers and electricians.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrade shop for plumbers and electricians + seasonal storage
trade shop for plumbers and electricians + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$316/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $316/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians cost?

A 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians from Steel and Stud starts at $15,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $316/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud trade shop for plumbers and electricians ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trade shop for plumbers and electricians different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $316/month on a 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy metal workshop with black roll-up door and lit windows over a misty mountain lake

20×45 Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and attached lean to equipment shelter

20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers | Steel and Stud, From $13,950

12

20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,900$13,950SAVE $1,950
or $291/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor with loader, a UTV, a brush.

You’re viewing:Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,950$15,900Save $1,950
or as low as $291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Sides Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Ground Anchor
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-EQUIPMENT-SHED-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Our 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor with loader, a UTV, a brush hog, and round bales under one 20×45 roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed for hobby farmers
Everyday equipment shed for hobby farmers
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed for hobby farmers.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed for hobby farmers + seasonal storage
equipment shed for hobby farmers + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers cost?

A 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers from Steel and Stud starts at $13,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment shed for hobby farmers ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed for hobby farmers different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $291/month on a 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and attached lean to equipment shelter

20×45 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper metal garage with open roll-up door revealing a boat near lakeside pines

20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Boat & Trailer Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake-house owners fit a 28-foot wakeboat on a tandem trailer plus a jet-ski trailer behind it, all under one roof. Tall 12-foot legs clear the tower and bimini stack. Optional 20×45 roll-up at the gable lets you back.

You’re viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Lake-house owners fit a 28-foot wakeboat on a tandem trailer plus a jet-ski trailer behind it, all under one roof.

Boat + trailerDaily driverOutboard / rinse20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Tall 12-foot legs clear the tower and bimini stack.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Rated.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 20×45 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 20×45 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×45 boat & trailer storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper metal garage with open roll-up door revealing a boat near lakeside pines

20×45 Boat & Trailer Storage

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit workshop with attached lean-to, tan trim, and covered truck parking

20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Woodworkers and weekend mechanics who want a dedicated project.

You’re viewing:Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Double Window
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-HOBBY-GARAGE-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Our 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Woodworkers and weekend mechanics who want a dedicated project space, not just a parking spot, use the 20×45 to build a one-bay lift zone plus a 25-foot tool wall with table saw, drill press, and dust collection.

💡 Pro tip:Insulated Roof. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby garage and project car bay
Everyday hobby garage and project car bay
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby garage and project car bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby garage and project car bay + seasonal storage
hobby garage and project car bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay cost?

A 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby garage and project car bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby garage and project car bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×45 hobby garage and project car bay typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit workshop with attached lean-to, tan trim, and covered truck parking

20×45 Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green steel barn at dusk with lit windows and a horse in the pasture

20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room | Steel and Stud, From $13,950

12

20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,900$13,950SAVE $1,950
or $291/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

20×45 delivers 900 sq ft of rugged run-in horse shelter with tack room space. Vertical-roof panels shed rain cleanly off the back, and 14-gauge framing holds up to leaning livestock. Most buyers add a kickwall on the.

You’re viewing:Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,950$15,900Save $1,950
or as low as $291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$13,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • Tack Room Wall
  • Kickwall
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-RUN-IN-HORSE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. 20×45 delivers 900 sq ft of rugged run-in horse shelter with tack room space.

2 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

2 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

2 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 2 horses + tack + feed. Vertical-roof panels shed rain cleanly off the back, and 14-gauge framing holds up to leaning livestock.

💡 Pro tip:Vertical Roof. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday run-in horse shelter with tack room
Everyday run-in horse shelter with tack room
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a run-in horse shelter with tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrun-in horse shelter with tack room + seasonal storage
run-in horse shelter with tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room cost?

A 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $13,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud run-in horse shelter with tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud run-in horse shelter with tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $291/month on a 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green steel barn at dusk with lit windows and a horse in the pasture

20×45 Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal building interior self storage corridor with orange roll-up doors and bright lights

20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators | Steel and Stud, From $15,150

12

20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,250$15,150SAVE $2,100
or $316/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators, engineered for code-compliant business use.

20×45 delivers 900 sq ft of code-compliant storage building for self-storage operators space. The pre-engineered framing means stamped drawings ship with the kit, which speeds county permitting. Concrete wedge anchors.

You’re viewing:Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,150$17,250Save $2,100
or as low as $316/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$15,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partitions
  • Concrete Anchor
  • IBC Compliant
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your self-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. 20×45 delivers 900 sq ft of code-compliant storage building for self-storage operators space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row AUnit row BHallway / Office20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · self-storage layout

Unit row A · Unit row B · Hallway / Office

Unit row A at the front, unit row b in the middle, hallway / office at the rear. The pre-engineered framing means stamped drawings ship with the kit, which speeds county permitting.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Compliant.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building for self-storage operators
Everyday storage building for self-storage operators
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building for self-storage operators.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building for self-storage operators + seasonal storage
storage building for self-storage operators + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$316/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $316/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators cost?

A 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators from Steel and Stud starts at $15,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $316/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building for self-storage operators ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building for self-storage operators different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $316/month on a 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×45 storage building for self-storage operators meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal building interior self storage corridor with orange roll-up doors and bright lights

20×45 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel garage with white roll-up door and pickup truck parked outside

20×45 Man Cave or She Shed

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Man Cave or She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $13,300

12

20×45 Man Cave or She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Man Cave or She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Man Cave or She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×45 man cave or she shed packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. At 900 square feet, the 20×45 fits a full bar, a pool table, lounge seating, and a TV wall.

You’re viewing:Man Cave or She Shed·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×36
smaller
$10,650
20×45
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Storefront Window
  • Wainscot
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×45 man cave or she shed packs 900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. At 900 square feet, the 20×45 fits a full bar, a pool table, lounge seating, and a TV wall with room left over for a half bath.

💡 Pro tip:Wainscot.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Man Cave or She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave or She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave or She Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave or She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave or she shed
Everyday man cave or she shed
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave or she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave or she shed + seasonal storage
man cave or she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Man Cave or She Shed, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 man cave or she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave or She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Man Cave or She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Man Cave or She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave or She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave or She Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave or She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 man cave or she shed cost?

A 20×45 man cave or she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 man cave or she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave or she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 man cave or she shed?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave or she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 man cave or she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 man cave or she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 man cave or she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 20×45 man cave or she shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 man cave or she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 man cave or she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×45 man cave or she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×45 man cave or she shed typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave or She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel garage with white roll-up door and pickup truck parked outside

20×45 Man Cave or She Shed

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Inside a metal building showing galvanized steel framing, gray wall panels, and concrete floor

20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage | Steel and Stud, From $15,150

12

20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,250$15,150SAVE $2,100
or $316/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

20×45 delivers 900 sq ft of code-compliant food truck and mobile vendor garage space. Food truck operators park a 22-foot truck plus a prep trailer or commissary cart inside an 20×45 with 14-foot legs. Tall doors clear.

You’re viewing:Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,150$17,250Save $2,100
or as low as $316/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$15,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Tall Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-FOOD-TRUCK-MOBILBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. 20×45 delivers 900 sq ft of code-compliant food truck and mobile vendor garage space.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Food truck operators park a 22-foot truck plus a prep trailer or commissary cart inside an 20×45 with 14-foot legs.

💡 Pro tip:Tall Door. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday food truck and mobile vendor garage
Everyday food truck and mobile vendor garage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a food truck and mobile vendor garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfood truck and mobile vendor garage + seasonal storage
food truck and mobile vendor garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$316/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $316/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏛️ 20×45

Fire Department Apparatus Bay

20×45 fire department apparatus bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fire Department Apparatus Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage cost?

A 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage from Steel and Stud starts at $15,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $316/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud food truck and mobile vendor garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud food truck and mobile vendor garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $316/month on a 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Inside a metal building showing galvanized steel framing, gray wall panels, and concrete floor

20×45 Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal garage interior with galvanized steel panels and roll-up door open to the lawn

20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay | Steel and Stud, From $15,250

12

20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,400$15,250SAVE $2,150
or $318/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×45Fire Department Apparatus Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 20×45 fire department apparatus bay fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Volunteer fire departments and rural EMS use the 20×45 as an auxiliary.

You’re viewing:Fire Department Apparatus Bay·Size20×45·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,250$17,400Save $2,150
or as low as $318/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×45
20×45
this size
$15,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IBC Certified
  • Stamped Plans
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X45-FIRE-DEPARTMENT-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fire department apparatus bay layout.

20 feet wide × 45 feet long. Our 20×45 fire department apparatus bay fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 45′ · 900 sq ft · fire department apparatus bay layout

Fire Department Apparatus Bay layout.

Our 20×45 fire department apparatus bay fits 20-foot widths and 45-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Volunteer fire departments and rural EMS use the 20×45 as an auxiliary apparatus bay for a brush truck or tanker. Tall 12-14 foot legs clear light bars. Stamped engineered drawings, IBC certification, and a 12-gauge frame meet most municipal procurement specs without a custom redesign.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Plans.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fire Department Apparatus Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×45 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fire Department Apparatus Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length45′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fire Department Apparatus Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday fire department apparatus bay
Everyday fire department apparatus bay
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fire department apparatus bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfire department apparatus bay + seasonal storage
fire department apparatus bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay, what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$318/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×45 fire department apparatus bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $318/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×45?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 45′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fire Department Apparatus Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×45 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×45 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fire Department Apparatus Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×46×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fire Department Apparatus Bay also viewed:

🏡 20×45

Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

20×45 detached garage with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →

🎯 20×45

RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes

20×45 rv cover for class c motorhomes configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover for Class C Motorhomes →

🏡 20×45

Two-Car Single-File Garage

20×45 two-car single-file garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Single-File Garage →

🏢 20×45

Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians

20×45 trade shop for plumbers and electricians configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trade Shop for Plumbers and Electricians →

🌾 20×45

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers

20×45 equipment shed for hobby farmers configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farmers →

🎯 20×45

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×45 boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏡 20×45

Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay

20×45 hobby garage and project car bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Garage and Project Car Bay →

🌾 20×45

Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room

20×45 run-in horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Run-In Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 20×45

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×45 storage building for self-storage operators configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →

🏡 20×45

Man Cave or She Shed

20×45 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 20×45

Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage

20×45 food truck and mobile vendor garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Food Truck and Mobile Vendor Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fire Department Apparatus Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×45 fire department apparatus bay cost?

A 20×45 fire department apparatus bay from Steel and Stud starts at $15,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $318/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×45 fire department apparatus bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fire department apparatus bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×45 fire department apparatus bay?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fire department apparatus bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×45 fire department apparatus bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×45 fire department apparatus bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×45 fire department apparatus bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $318/month on a 20×45 fire department apparatus bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×45 fire department apparatus bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×45 fire department apparatus bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×45 fire department apparatus bay pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Fire Department Apparatus Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal garage interior with galvanized steel panels and roll-up door open to the lawn

20×45 Fire Department Apparatus Bay

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 45′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×45 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black roll-up door and concrete apron under a vivid sunset

20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $13,600

12

20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,500$13,600SAVE $1,900
or $283/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop? At 920 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Two F-150s park nose-in with a roll-up door per bay, then the rear holds a.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,600$15,500Save $1,900
or as low as $283/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$13,600
20×48
longer
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Two 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-TWO-CAR-GARAGE-PBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop? At 920 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two F-150s park nose-in with a roll-up door per bay, then the rear holds a tablesaw, drill press, and rolling toolbox.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install Included. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car garage plus workshop
Everyday two-car garage plus workshop
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car garage plus workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car garage plus workshop + seasonal storage
two-car garage plus workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$283/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $283/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop also viewed:

🎯 20×46

Enclosed RV Garage Kit

20×46 enclosed rv garage kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed RV Garage Kit →

🏢 20×46

Contractor Shop and Office

20×46 contractor shop and office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop and Office →

🌾 20×46

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

20×46 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🎯 20×46

Boat and Toy Storage

20×46 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 20×46

Detached Garage With Loft

20×46 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage With Loft →

🏢 20×46

Auto Repair Shop

20×46 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop cost?

A 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $13,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $283/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car garage plus workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car garage plus workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $283/month on a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×46 two-car garage plus workshop typically adds $7,360–$11,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black roll-up door and concrete apron under a vivid sunset

20×46 Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel carport sheltering a luxury motorhome beside an enclosed storage room

20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit | Steel and Stud, From $13,600

12

20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,500$13,600SAVE $1,900
or $283/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Enclosed RV Garage Kit

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit, built for hobby and recreational use.

20×46 delivers 920 sq ft of hobby-ready enclosed rv garage kit space. RV owners pick the 20×46 because a 40-foot Class A fits with 8 feet of bonus storage behind it. A 20×46 roll-up clears most fifth-wheels and toy.

You’re viewing:Enclosed RV Garage Kit·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,600$15,500Save $1,900
or as low as $283/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$13,600
20×48
longer
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame Upgrade
  • 14×14 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-ENCLOSED-RV-GARABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. 20×46 delivers 920 sq ft of hobby-ready enclosed rv garage kit space.

RV bayDaily driverHookup / pre-wire20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 42ft + 1 daily driver. RV owners pick the 20×46 because a 40-foot Class A fits with 8 feet of bonus storage behind it.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane-Rated Available. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Enclosed RV Garage Kit.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Enclosed RV Garage Kit spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Enclosed RV Garage Kit.

DAILY USEEveryday enclosed rv garage kit
Everyday enclosed rv garage kit
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a enclosed rv garage kit.
STORAGE OVERFLOWenclosed rv garage kit + seasonal storage
enclosed rv garage kit + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$283/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $283/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Enclosed RV Garage Kit shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Enclosed RV Garage Kit · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Enclosed RV Garage Kit also viewed:

🏡 20×46

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

20×46 two-car garage plus workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop →

🏢 20×46

Contractor Shop and Office

20×46 contractor shop and office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop and Office →

🌾 20×46

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

20×46 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🎯 20×46

Boat and Toy Storage

20×46 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 20×46

Detached Garage With Loft

20×46 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage With Loft →

🏢 20×46

Auto Repair Shop

20×46 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Enclosed RV Garage Kit questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit cost?

A 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit from Steel and Stud starts at $13,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $283/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud enclosed rv garage kit ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud enclosed rv garage kit different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $283/month on a 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×46 enclosed rv garage kit for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a enclosed rv garage kit to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Enclosed RV Garage Kit quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel carport sheltering a luxury motorhome beside an enclosed storage room

20×46 Enclosed RV Garage Kit

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

20×46 Contractor Shop and Office

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Contractor Shop and Office | Steel and Stud, From $15,450

12

20×46 Contractor Shop and Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,600$15,450SAVE $2,150
or $322/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Contractor Shop and Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Contractor Shop and Office, engineered for code-compliant business use.

20×46 delivers 920 sq ft of code-compliant contractor shop and office space. Tradespeople, electricians, plumbers, HVAC techs, split the 48-foot length into a 32-foot truck bay and a 16-foot office with restroom. Two.

You’re viewing:Contractor Shop and Office·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,450$17,600Save $2,150
or as low as $322/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$15,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-CONTRACTOR-SHOP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. 20×46 delivers 920 sq ft of code-compliant contractor shop and office space.

Inventory racksLOADING BAYOffice / Desk20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Tradespeople, electricians, plumbers, HVAC techs, split the 48-foot length into a 32-foot truck bay and a 16-foot office with restroom.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Drawings.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Contractor Shop and Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop and Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop and Office spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop and Office.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop and office
Everyday contractor shop and office
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop and office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop and office + seasonal storage
contractor shop and office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Contractor Shop and Office, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$322/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 contractor shop and office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $322/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop and Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Contractor Shop and Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Contractor Shop and Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Shop and Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop and Office also viewed:

🏡 20×46

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

20×46 two-car garage plus workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop →

🎯 20×46

Enclosed RV Garage Kit

20×46 enclosed rv garage kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed RV Garage Kit →

🌾 20×46

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

20×46 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🎯 20×46

Boat and Toy Storage

20×46 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 20×46

Detached Garage With Loft

20×46 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage With Loft →

🏢 20×46

Auto Repair Shop

20×46 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop and Office questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 contractor shop and office cost?

A 20×46 contractor shop and office from Steel and Stud starts at $15,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $322/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 contractor shop and office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor shop and office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 contractor shop and office?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop and office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 contractor shop and office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 contractor shop and office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 contractor shop and office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $322/month on a 20×46 contractor shop and office.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 contractor shop and office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 contractor shop and office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×46 contractor shop and office meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop and Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

20×46 Contractor Shop and Office

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $14,250

12

20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,250$14,250SAVE $2,000
or $297/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn? At 920 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers shelter a compact tractor, a hay wagon, a UTV, and three months of hay bales.

You’re viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Barn·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,250$16,250Save $2,000
or as low as $297/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$14,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Front Option
  • 30 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. Looking for a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn? At 920 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Hobby farmers shelter a compact tractor, a hay wagon, a UTV, and three months of hay bales under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Lean-To Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment barn
Everyday hobby farm equipment barn
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$297/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $297/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 20×46

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

20×46 two-car garage plus workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop →

🎯 20×46

Enclosed RV Garage Kit

20×46 enclosed rv garage kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed RV Garage Kit →

🏢 20×46

Contractor Shop and Office

20×46 contractor shop and office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop and Office →

🎯 20×46

Boat and Toy Storage

20×46 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 20×46

Detached Garage With Loft

20×46 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage With Loft →

🏢 20×46

Auto Repair Shop

20×46 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn cost?

A 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $14,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $297/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $297/month on a 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×46 hobby farm equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

20×46 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Jet ski on a trailer outside a dark green prefab metal building at dusk

20×46 Boat and Toy Storage

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $13,600

12

20×46 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,500$13,600SAVE $1,900
or $283/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 20×46 boat and toy storage fits 20-foot widths and 46-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. A 24-foot bass boat on a trailer takes 30 feet bumper-to-bumper, leaving 18.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,600$15,500Save $1,900
or as low as $283/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$13,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. Our 20×46 boat and toy storage fits 20-foot widths and 46-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

BOAT + TRAILERDaily driverOutboard / rinse20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. A 24-foot bass boat on a trailer takes 30 feet bumper-to-bumper, leaving 18 feet for jet skis, kayaks, and a workbench.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal-Rated.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$283/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $283/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×46

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

20×46 two-car garage plus workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop →

🎯 20×46

Enclosed RV Garage Kit

20×46 enclosed rv garage kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed RV Garage Kit →

🏢 20×46

Contractor Shop and Office

20×46 contractor shop and office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop and Office →

🌾 20×46

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

20×46 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🏡 20×46

Detached Garage With Loft

20×46 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage With Loft →

🏢 20×46

Auto Repair Shop

20×46 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 boat and toy storage cost?

A 20×46 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $283/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $283/month on a 20×46 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×46 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Jet ski on a trailer outside a dark green prefab metal building at dusk

20×46 Boat and Toy Storage

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal garage with double black roll-up doors and black trim among tall pines

20×46 Detached Garage With Loft

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Detached Garage With Loft | Steel and Stud, From $13,600

12

20×46 Detached Garage With Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,500$13,600SAVE $1,900
or $283/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Detached Garage With Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Detached Garage With Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×46 detached garage with loft fits 20-foot widths and 46-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Add a 20×46 mezzanine over the back third for a 920 sq ft loft, guest.

You’re viewing:Detached Garage With Loft·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,600$15,500Save $1,900
or as low as $283/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$13,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Mezzanine Loft
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-DETACHED-GARAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Our 20×46 detached garage with loft fits 20-foot widths and 46-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Add a 20×46 mezzanine over the back third for a 920 sq ft loft, guest space, home office, or seasonal storage.

💡 Pro tip:Engineered for Loads. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Detached Garage With Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Garage With Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Garage With Loft spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Garage With Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday detached garage with loft
Everyday detached garage with loft
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached garage with loft + seasonal storage
detached garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Detached Garage With Loft, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$283/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 detached garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $283/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Garage With Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Detached Garage With Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Detached Garage With Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Garage With Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Garage With Loft also viewed:

🏡 20×46

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

20×46 two-car garage plus workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop →

🎯 20×46

Enclosed RV Garage Kit

20×46 enclosed rv garage kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed RV Garage Kit →

🏢 20×46

Contractor Shop and Office

20×46 contractor shop and office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop and Office →

🌾 20×46

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

20×46 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🎯 20×46

Boat and Toy Storage

20×46 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏢 20×46

Auto Repair Shop

20×46 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Garage With Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 detached garage with loft cost?

A 20×46 detached garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $13,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $283/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 detached garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 detached garage with loft?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 detached garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 detached garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 detached garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $283/month on a 20×46 detached garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 detached garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 detached garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×46 detached garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×46 detached garage with loft typically adds $7,360–$11,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Garage With Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal garage with double black roll-up doors and black trim among tall pines

20×46 Detached Garage With Loft

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Silver white metal building with brown trim, sedan parked in the open detailing bay

20×46 Auto Repair Shop

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×46 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $15,450

12

20×46 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,600$15,450SAVE $2,150
or $322/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×46Auto Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×46 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 20×46 auto repair shop fits 20-foot widths and 46-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Independent mechanics fit two service bays with a 9-foot two-post lift in each, plus a parts.

You’re viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,450$17,600Save $2,150
or as low as $322/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×46
20×46
this size
$15,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Eave Height
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Two 10×10 Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X46-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your service-bay layout.

20 feet wide × 46 feet long. Our 20×46 auto repair shop fits 20-foot widths and 46-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Lift bay 1LIFT BAY 2Parts / tools20′ × 46′ · 920 sq ft · service-bay layout

Lift bay 1 · Lift bay 2 · Parts / tools

Lift bay 1 at the front, lift bay 2 in the middle, parts / tools at the rear. Independent mechanics fit two service bays with a 9-foot two-post lift in each, plus a parts room and customer entry up front.

💡 Pro tip:Permit-Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×46 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length46′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×46 Auto Repair Shop, what makes it different.

920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$322/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×46 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $322/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×46?

920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 46′ footprint with 920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,360–$11,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×46 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×46 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,140+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×46

Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop

20×46 two-car garage plus workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage Plus Workshop →

🎯 20×46

Enclosed RV Garage Kit

20×46 enclosed rv garage kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed RV Garage Kit →

🏢 20×46

Contractor Shop and Office

20×46 contractor shop and office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop and Office →

🌾 20×46

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

20×46 hobby farm equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →

🎯 20×46

Boat and Toy Storage

20×46 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 20×46

Detached Garage With Loft

20×46 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage With Loft →

🌾 20×46

Horse Run-In and Tack Room

20×46 horse run-in and tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Run-In and Tack Room →

🏡 20×46

Backyard Workshop and Man Cave

20×46 backyard workshop and man cave configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop and Man Cave →

🏭 20×46

Welding and Fabrication Shop

20×46 welding and fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Welding and Fabrication Shop →

🎯 20×46

She Shed and Hobby Studio

20×46 she shed and hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed and Hobby Studio →

🏛️ 20×46

Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay

20×46 volunteer fire or community equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Volunteer Fire or Community Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×46 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×46 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $15,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $322/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×46 auto repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×46 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×46 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×46 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×46 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $322/month on a 20×46 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×46 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×46 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×46 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Silver white metal building with brown trim, sedan parked in the open detailing bay

20×46 Auto Repair Shop

920 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×46 steel building delivers 920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Need a custom size?

Order custom metal buildings in any width and length through Steel And Stud. Request metal building pricing or start your steel building design in 3D.

Instant Estimate

Commercial Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Work With Steel And Stud

Your Commercial Metal Building Dealer and Steel Building Contractor

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial building contractor and metal building dealer. From metal building pricing and steel building design to professional steel building installation, we manage your entire project. One point of contact, one fixed price.

🏭

Clear-Span Steel Structures for Commercial Use

Column-free interiors from 30 to 100+ feet wide. Steel structures for commercial properties including warehouses, retail showrooms, truck bays, racking systems and open floor plans for any business application.

📑

Permit-Ready Engineered Plans

Every commercial building order includes state-specific stamped drawings and foundation calculations engineered to your local building code. Submit directly to your permit office.

🚀

Fast Project Completion

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects go from order to operational in 4 to 12 weeks. On-site installation typically takes 1 to 5 days with our certified contractor crews.

🛡

Durable Commercial-Grade Steel

Galvanized steel framing with 20-year structural warranty on 12-gauge. Powder-coated panels in 17 colors resist rust, fire and termites. Built for decades of commercial use.

💰

Dealer-Direct Metal Building Pricing

As your dedicated Steel And Stud dealer, you get metal building pricing without middleman markups. Commercial building packages priced 30 to 50% below traditional metal building construction costs. Request pricing anytime.

🎯

Custom Steel Building Design Options

Choose any width and length to order custom metal buildings sized to your project. Add roll-up doors, walk-in entries, storefront windows, insulation, lean-tos, mezzanines and wainscot finishes. Complete steel building design flexibility from your Steel And Stud dealer.

Compare Commercial Building Packages

Standard vs Deluxe vs Custom Commercial Buildings

Steel And Stud offers three commercial building packages. Compare metal building pricing, included features and steel building design options below. Choose the right package, then request a quote from your Steel And Stud dealer.

 

Standard Commercial

Starting from $26,485 installed

Vertical roof and wall panels
14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel framing
Eave heights from 12 to 16 feet
Free delivery and professional installation included
Wainscot available as upgrade

Custom Commercial

Any size, quote-based

Any width and length based on project needs
Eave heights up to 24 feet, custom roof pitch
Red iron I-beam framing for wide clear spans
Lean-tos, mezzanines, dock access and custom layouts
Steel And Stud provides quotes within 24 hours
Customer Reviews

What Business Owners Say About Steel And Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Commercial Metal Buildings.

★★★★★
4.8 / 5.0 from 2,847 verified reviews
★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

RM
Ricardo M.
Phoenix, AZ
60x60x16 Commercial Building
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

DK
Diane K.
Charlotte, NC
40x100x14 Commercial Warehouse
★★★★☆

"Steel And Stud helped us plan and install a 50x50x16 Deluxe commercial building for our retail showroom. The wainscot and premium trim give it a professional look that impresses customers. Storefront windows and entry doors were pre-framed at the design stage so installation went smoothly. Looks like a project that cost twice what we paid."

TS
Trevor S.
Boise, ID
50x50x16 Deluxe Commercial Building
Frequently Asked Questions

Commercial Metal Building Buyer FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Steel And Stud commercial metal building pricing starts from $26,485 installed for a 36x40x14 Standard package. Mid-range options like the 40x100x14 warehouse start from $54,890. Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot start from $36,825. All prices shown are starting estimates and may vary based on your location, building codes, customization and project specifications. Final pricing is provided in your written quote. Custom sizes in any width and length are available.

Yes. Steel And Stud provides commercial metal buildings in any custom width and length based on your project requirements. Widths range from 20 to over 100 feet. Lengths extend up to 300 feet. Eave heights are configurable from 12 to 24 feet. Choose from the pre-configured sizes on this page or share your custom dimensions and a Steel And Stud specialist will quote it within 24 hours.

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. We partner with trusted production facilities to source pre-engineered steel buildings, then manage your entire project from planning and customization through delivery and professional steel building installation. This dealer-contractor approach gives you one point of contact from metal building pricing to completed metal building construction.

Yes. Steel And Stud is both a metal building dealer and a steel building contractor. Our certified crews handle professional steel building installation of commercial metal buildings across all 48 contiguous states. Most tubular steel buildings are installed in 1 to 5 days. Delivery and installation are included on standard orders.

Three ways to get metal building pricing and plan your project: (1) Submit a free quote request with your project details for a written commercial steel building quote within one business day. (2) Use the 3D building designer to configure steel building design options with live pricing. (3) Call 1-877-275-7048 to speak with a Steel And Stud dealer specialist.

Steel And Stud offers commercial metal buildings in any size. Pre-configured packages include 36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50 and 60x60 in both Standard and Deluxe series. Custom sizes are available in any width from 20 to 100+ feet and any length up to 300 feet, with eave heights from 12 to 24 feet. There are no fixed size limitations. Tell us your project dimensions and we will price it.

Steel And Stud provides metal buildings for business use across every industry: metal warehouse buildings, commercial storage buildings, metal shop buildings for auto and truck repair, metal retail buildings, steel office buildings, metal workshop buildings for fabrication, metal garage buildings, industrial metal buildings for manufacturing, and steel structures for commercial properties including fitness centers, churches, restaurants, aviation hangars and agricultural operations. Any business that needs a durable commercial metal structure can work with Steel And Stud as their dealer and steel building contractor.

Standard Commercial Buildings feature vertical roof and wall panels with base trim, available with eave heights from 12 to 16 feet. Best for warehouses, workshops, storage and back-of-house operations. Deluxe Commercial Buildings include two-tone wainscot, premium trim, extended eave heights and pre-framed openings for storefront windows. Best for retail, office, restaurant, fitness and customer-facing commercial spaces. Both series are available in any custom size.

Yes. Steel And Stud offers three payment options for commercial metal building projects: Standard payment with deposit at order and balance after installation, monthly financing starting from $109/mo with terms from 12 to 84 months, and rent-to-own starting from $89/mo with no credit check required.

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects are completed in 4 to 12 weeks from order to operational. On-site installation by our contractor crews typically takes 1 to 5 days for tubular steel structures. Larger red iron projects may take longer based on engineering and production requirements.

Yes. Every Steel And Stud commercial steel building is engineered to meet the specific snow, wind and seismic requirements for your installation location. Each order includes stamped engineered drawings and foundation calculations ready for permit submission. Steel And Stud handles engineering as part of our full-service metal building construction and commercial building contractor support.

Get Your Free Quote

Request Commercial Metal Building Pricing

Looking for a metal building dealer near me or a commercial building contractor near me? Steel And Stud serves all 48 states. Share your project details and our commercial building contractor team will return a written quote with metal building pricing within one business day.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor working with business owners across all 48 contiguous states. We help you scope the project, source the right pre-engineered steel building, customize the layout, manage engineering and permitting, and complete professional installation through certified contractor crews. The result is a single accountable partner from your first conversation through the final walk-through, instead of a chain of separate vendors managing different parts of the same job.

Custom Commercial Steel Buildings in Any Width and Length

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is sized to the project, not pulled from a fixed catalog. Widths run from roughly 20 feet on tubular framing to over 100 feet on red iron I-beam, with lengths reaching 300 feet and eave heights set anywhere from 12 to 24 feet. The pre-configured options on this page (36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50, 60x60 and Deluxe variants) are popular starting points, but if your operation needs a 45x80 metal warehouse building, a 38x140 distribution center, or a 55x55 steel office building with a 20-foot eave for a mezzanine, that is the size you order. Sizing decisions follow your floor plan, racking layout, vehicle clearance, equipment height and zoning requirements, not a preset list.

Commercial Applications We Build For

Steel And Stud commercial steel buildings serve a wide cross-section of business types. Warehouse operators and 3PL providers use clear-span metal warehouse buildings to maximize racking capacity and forklift movement. Auto and truck repair shops select tall-eave steel shop buildings with multi-bay roll-up doors that clear two-post lifts and service trucks. Retailers, dealerships and showroom operators choose Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot and storefront window openings to project a polished, customer-facing exterior. Light manufacturers, fabrication shops and contractor yards run their operations out of metal workshop buildings sized for welding tables, machine tools and equipment staging.

Beyond those core uses, churches and event venues install wide clear-span steel structures for sanctuaries and fellowship halls; fitness operators and indoor sports facilities use tall-eave commercial buildings for courts, CrossFit boxes and batting cages; agricultural businesses build packing sheds and farm-retail commercial space; aviation operators install steel hangars for general aviation aircraft and helicopters; and self-storage developers partition long commercial buildings into rentable units. Whatever your business does inside the building, the building is engineered around it.

How to Get Pricing and Start Your Project

The fastest path to accurate metal building pricing is a written quote. Submit your approximate dimensions, intended use and installation address through the free quote form and a Steel And Stud commercial building specialist returns a detailed written quote within one business day. The quote reflects your specific width and length, eave height, framing gauge, door and window selections, insulation package, finish choices and the snow, wind and seismic requirements at your installation location. There is no obligation, no pressure, and you are free to compare and adjust before placing the order.

If you prefer to explore configurations visually first, the 3D building designer lets you set dimensions, add doors and windows, change finishes and see live pricing as you adjust. Or call 1-877-275-7048 to reach a specialist directly. However you start, the goal is project-level numbers fast enough to move on real timelines.

Standard, Deluxe and Custom Building Packages

Steel And Stud delivers three commercial building package tiers. Standard Commercial Buildings are the workhorse choice for warehouses, workshops, contractor yards, mini-storage and back-of-house operations where function takes priority over facade. They include vertical roof and wall panels, galvanized steel framing in 14-gauge or 12-gauge, eave heights from 12 to 16 feet, free delivery and professional installation, with starting prices from $26,485 installed.

Deluxe Commercial Buildings are designed for customer-facing applications where exterior appearance matters: retail stores, restaurants, professional offices, fitness centers, auto dealerships and worship halls. The Deluxe package adds a two-tone wainscot exterior, premium gable and corner trim, extended eave heights up to 18 feet and pre-framed openings ready for storefront windows, additional doors and ADA-compliant entries. Starting prices begin at $36,825 installed.

Custom Commercial Buildings cover everything the Standard and Deluxe packages do not. Red iron I-beam clear spans up to 100 feet, eave heights above 18 feet, mezzanine levels, lean-tos on multiple sides, dock-leveler-ready loading bays, custom roof pitches and specialized door layouts are quoted individually based on your engineering and site requirements. There is no dimension or feature Steel And Stud cannot accommodate as a custom project.

Steel Building Design and Configuration Options

Customization happens at the design stage, before your building enters production, so installation runs without surprises. Door options span sectional roll-up garage doors from 8x8 up to 16x16 for vehicle bays and equipment access, commercial walk-in doors for daily foot traffic, and storefront entry systems with pre-framed openings for customer-facing builds. Window openings can be placed on any wall and sized to match retail visibility, office natural light or warehouse ventilation needs. Insulation runs from R-13 for moderate climate buffering up to R-30 for fully conditioned commercial interiors with HVAC.

Beyond doors, windows and insulation, you can add lean-to canopies on any side for covered loading or outdoor work, mezzanine levels to add usable square footage without expanding the footprint, interior partition walls for offices or partitioned storage, dock-height openings for trailer loading, and pre-engineered HVAC penetrations. Exterior color is selected from 17 panel options, applied independently across roof, walls, trim and (on Deluxe builds) wainscot, so the finished commercial steel building reflects your brand or fits the surrounding architecture.

Engineering, Permitting and Code Compliance

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is engineered for the specific snow, wind and seismic loads at your installation address, with stamped drawings and foundation calculations included in every order ready for permit submission. Engineering is handled in-house as part of standard service, so there is no need to hire a separate structural engineer or coordinate stamps from multiple parties. The package covers what your local building department requires for commercial permits, including ground snow load, basic wind speed, exposure category and seismic risk category specific to your zip code.

Professional Installation by Certified Steel And Stud Contractor Crews

Once the permit is approved and your site is prepared, Steel And Stud contractor crews arrive to complete the steel building installation on your schedule. Most tubular steel commercial buildings reach a weather-tight, fully erected state in one to five days on site, depending on dimensions and configuration. Larger red iron I-beam projects with custom features run longer based on span width, mezzanine work and specialized openings. The typical timeline from order placement to a fully operational commercial metal building is four to twelve weeks, against four to nine months for stick-built or block construction of equivalent square footage. You pay your deposit at order and the balance after the completed walk-through.

Commercial Metal Building Pricing and What Drives Cost

Pricing on a commercial metal building moves with the build. Two structures with the same dimensions can quote very differently once you factor in framing gauge, eave height, the snow and wind loads at the site, door and window count, insulation depth, finish package, lean-to additions, mezzanine work and any custom engineering. A 36x40x14 with three roll-up doors, a walk-in entry, R-19 insulation and a 14-foot lean-to is a different building from a 36x40x14 in base configuration, even though the dimensions match. Your written quote from Steel And Stud reflects the building you are actually ordering, with starting prices serving as a baseline rather than a final number.

Financing, Rent-to-Own and Section 179

Three payment paths are available for every commercial metal building project. Standard payment splits the total into a deposit at order and the balance after installation, which delivers the lowest total cost. Monthly financing starts from $109 per month with terms from 12 to 84 months and a soft credit pull. Rent-to-own starts from $89 per month, requires no credit check, and transfers ownership at the end of a 24 to 60 month term. Business buyers may also qualify for Section 179 deductions, which can allow a full first-year deduction on qualifying commercial metal building purchases.

Service Coverage Across All 48 States

Steel And Stud delivers and installs commercial metal buildings throughout the lower 48. Coverage extends to every state, but each project is engineered and permitted around the codes, snow and wind loads, and inspection processes of your specific installation address. Business owners working with a metal building dealer near them or hiring a commercial building contractor in their state get the same Steel And Stud team and the same dealer-direct pricing, with a project specialist who knows the local permit office and matches the build to your jurisdiction.

Why Buyers Choose Steel And Stud

The dealer-contractor model condenses what would normally be three or four separate vendor relationships into one. Instead of negotiating with a manufacturer, contracting an erector, hiring a structural engineer and managing freight separately, you place a single order with Steel And Stud and receive an engineered, delivered, installed commercial steel building under one fixed quote. There is no general contractor markup added to the chain, no broker margin built into freight, and no finger-pointing between vendors when something needs adjusting. Steel And Stud has served commercial customers since 2004, holds an A+ BBB rating, and carries over 2,800 verified buyer reviews averaging 4.8 stars across project sizes from small workshops to multi-acre distribution facilities.

Start Your Commercial Steel Building Project Today

Ready to plan your project? Submit a free quote request, configure your build in the 3D designer, or call 1-877-275-7048. A Steel And Stud specialist will return your written commercial steel building quote within one business day, walk you through customization options, line up financing if needed, and schedule professional installation once the project is locked in.

Related Steel And Stud Building Categories

Outside of commercial metal buildings, Steel And Stud also operates as a dealer and contractor for residential and agricultural structures including steel garages, metal barns, metal carports, RV covers and barndominiums. Steel building materials such as purlins, girts, standing seam roofing and insulated metal panels are also available for self-build and material-only projects.

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Dealer-direct metal building pricing starting from $26,485 installed. All prices are starting estimates. Custom sizes in any width and length. Professional steel building installation by our commercial building contractor team across 48 states. Get a free quote or call your nearest Steel And Stud commercial building contractor to plan your project today.

View Cart